blob: 906e902230662562c97f03a7ccd37e6339747eba [file] [log] [blame]
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001/*
Johannes Berg3017b802007-08-28 17:01:53 -04002 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
3 *
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
5 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +02006 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
Johannes Bergd98ad832014-09-03 15:24:57 +03007 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
Avraham Sterne38a0172017-04-26 10:58:47 +03008 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07009 *
10 * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
11 * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
12 * published by the Free Software Foundation.
13 */
14
15#ifndef MAC80211_H
16#define MAC80211_H
17
Paul Gortmaker187f1882011-11-23 20:12:59 -050018#include <linux/bug.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070019#include <linux/kernel.h>
20#include <linux/if_ether.h>
21#include <linux/skbuff.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070022#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070023#include <net/cfg80211.h>
Michal Kazior5caa3282016-05-19 10:37:51 +020024#include <net/codel.h>
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +020025#include <asm/unaligned.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070026
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040027/**
28 * DOC: Introduction
29 *
30 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
31 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
32 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
33 * drivers.
34 */
35
36/**
37 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
38 *
39 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070040 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
41 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
42 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +010043 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
44 * tasklet function.
45 *
46 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -070047 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070048 */
49
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040050/**
51 * DOC: Warning
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070052 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040053 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
54 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
55 */
56
57/**
58 * DOC: Frame format
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070059 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040060 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
61 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
62 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
63 * hardware.
64 *
65 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
66 *
67 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
68 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
69 *
70 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
71 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070072 */
73
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +020074/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040075 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
76 *
77 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
78 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
79 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
80 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
81 *
82 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
83 * suspend.
84 *
85 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
86 *
87 */
88
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +010089/**
90 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
91 *
92 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
93 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
94 * between different stations/interfaces.
95 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
96 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
97 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
98 *
99 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
100 * driver operation.
101 *
102 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with a
103 * single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
104 *
105 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
106 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
107 *
Johannes Berge7881bd52017-12-19 10:11:54 +0100108 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame, it calls
109 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a queue, it
110 * calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +0100111 *
112 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
113 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
114 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
115 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
116 * .release_buffered_frames().
117 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
118 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
119 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
120 */
121
Paul Gortmaker313162d2012-01-30 11:46:54 -0500122struct device;
123
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -0400124/**
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200125 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
126 *
127 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100128 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200129 */
130enum ieee80211_max_queues {
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200131 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100132 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200133};
134
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200135#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
136
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200137/**
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800138 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
139 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
140 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
141 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
142 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
143 */
144enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
145 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
146 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
147 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
148 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
149};
150
151/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400152 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
153 *
154 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100155 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400156 *
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -0400157 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200158 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
159 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400160 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100161 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300162 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +0200163 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400164 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700165struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200166 u16 txop;
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100167 u16 cw_min;
168 u16 cw_max;
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200169 u8 aifs;
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300170 bool acm;
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +0200171 bool uapsd;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700172};
173
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700174struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
175 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
176 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
177 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
178 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
179};
180
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100181/**
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200182 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100183 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200184 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100185 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200186 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
187 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200188 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200189 */
190enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100191 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200192 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100193 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200194 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200195 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200196};
197
198/**
199 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
200 *
201 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
202 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
203 *
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100204 * @def: the channel definition
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200205 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200206 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
207 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
208 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
209 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
Simon Wunderlich5d7fad42012-11-30 19:17:28 +0100210 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100211 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200212 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
213 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
214 */
215struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100216 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200217 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200218
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200219 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
220
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100221 bool radar_enabled;
222
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +0100223 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200224};
225
226/**
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +0300227 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
228 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
229 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
230 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
231 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
232 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
233 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
234 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
235 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
236 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
237 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
238 * for changes/removal.)
239 */
240enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
241 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
242 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
243};
244
245/**
246 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
247 *
248 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
249 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
250 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
251 * done.
252 *
253 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
254 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
255 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
256 */
257struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
258 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
259 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
260 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
261};
262
263/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100264 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
265 *
266 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
267 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
268 *
269 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
270 * also implies a change in the AID.
271 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
272 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300273 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
Tomas Winkler38668c02008-03-28 16:33:32 -0700274 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200275 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200276 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200277 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
278 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
279 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
280 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
281 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
282 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200283 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200284 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300285 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200286 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
287 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200288 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200289 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200290 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300291 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200292 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100293 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200294 * changed
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300295 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
296 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100297 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
298 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
299 * context had been assigned.
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100300 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200301 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
Avraham Sterne38a0172017-04-26 10:58:47 +0300302 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
303 * keep alive) changed.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100304 */
305enum ieee80211_bss_change {
306 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
307 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
308 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300309 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
Alexander Simona7ce1c92011-09-18 00:16:45 +0200310 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200311 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200312 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200313 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
314 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
315 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200316 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200317 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300318 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200319 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200320 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300321 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200322 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300323 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200324 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100325 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300326 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100327 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100328 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22,
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200329 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23,
Avraham Sterne38a0172017-04-26 10:58:47 +0300330 BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE = 1<<24,
Johannes Bergac8dd502010-05-05 09:44:02 +0200331
332 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100333};
334
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300335/*
336 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
337 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
338 * filtering will be disabled.
339 */
340#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
341
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100342/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200343 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
344 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200345 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300346 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300347 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
348 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
349 * once each time the timeout triggers.
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700350 */
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200351enum ieee80211_event_type {
352 RSSI_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200353 MLME_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300354 BAR_RX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300355 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200356};
357
358/**
359 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
360 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
361 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
362 */
363enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700364 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
365 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
366};
367
368/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200369 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200370 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
371 */
372struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
373 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
374};
375
376/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200377 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
378 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200379 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200380 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
381 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200382 */
383enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
384 AUTH_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200385 ASSOC_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200386 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
387 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200388};
389
390/**
391 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
392 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
393 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
394 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
395 */
396enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
397 MLME_SUCCESS,
398 MLME_DENIED,
399 MLME_TIMEOUT,
400};
401
402/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200403 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200404 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
405 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
406 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
407 */
408struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
409 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
410 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
411 u16 reason;
412};
413
414/**
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300415 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
416 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
417 * @tid: the tid
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300418 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300419 */
420struct ieee80211_ba_event {
421 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
422 u16 tid;
423 u16 ssn;
424};
425
426/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200427 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200428 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200429 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200430 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300431 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300432 * @u:union holding the fields above
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200433 */
434struct ieee80211_event {
435 enum ieee80211_event_type type;
436 union {
437 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200438 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300439 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200440 } u;
441};
442
443/**
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200444 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
445 *
446 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
447 *
448 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
449 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
450 */
451struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
452 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
453 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
454};
455
456/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100457 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
458 *
459 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
460 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
461 *
462 * @assoc: association status
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200463 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
464 * or not
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530465 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100466 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
467 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
Johannes Bergea1b2b452015-06-02 20:15:49 +0200468 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
469 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +0100470 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +0200471 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300472 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200473 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100474 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
475 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
476 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
477 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200478 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200479 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
480 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200481 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100482 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
483 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200484 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
485 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
486 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700487 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800488 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200489 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
490 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
491 * the current band.
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300492 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100493 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200494 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
495 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100496 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
497 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200498 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
Johannes Berg074d46d2012-03-15 19:45:16 +0100499 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
Avri Altman22f66892015-08-18 16:52:07 +0300500 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
501 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
502 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200503 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
Johannes Berge86abc62015-10-22 17:35:14 +0200504 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
505 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
506 * relation to the newly configured threshold.
Andrew Zaborowski2c3c5f8c2017-02-10 04:50:22 +0100507 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
508 * implies disabled. This is an alternative mechanism to the single
509 * threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
510 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200511 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300512 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
513 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
514 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
515 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100516 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
517 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
518 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200519 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200520 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
521 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
522 * your driver/device needs to do.
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300523 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
524 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200525 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300526 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
527 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200528 * @txpower: TX power in dBm
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100529 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
530 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
531 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
532 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
533 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
534 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100535 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200536 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
537 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
538 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
Avraham Sterne38a0172017-04-26 10:58:47 +0300539 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
540 * transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
541 * In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
542 * a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
543 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
544 * protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
545 * station.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100546 */
547struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200548 const u8 *bssid;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100549 /* association related data */
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200550 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530551 bool ibss_creator;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100552 u16 aid;
553 /* erp related data */
554 bool use_cts_prot;
555 bool use_short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300556 bool use_short_slot;
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200557 bool enable_beacon;
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800558 u8 dtim_period;
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700559 u16 beacon_int;
560 u16 assoc_capability;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200561 u64 sync_tsf;
562 u32 sync_device_ts;
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100563 u8 sync_dtim_count;
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +0100564 u32 basic_rates;
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300565 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +0200566 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200567 u16 ht_operation_mode;
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200568 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
569 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
Andrew Zaborowski2c3c5f8c2017-02-10 04:50:22 +0100570 s32 cqm_rssi_low;
571 s32 cqm_rssi_high;
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100572 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200573 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300574 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100575 int arp_addr_cnt;
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200576 bool qos;
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200577 bool idle;
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300578 bool ps;
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300579 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
580 size_t ssid_len;
581 bool hidden_ssid;
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200582 int txpower;
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100583 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100584 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200585 bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
Avraham Sterne38a0172017-04-26 10:58:47 +0300586 u16 max_idle_period;
587 bool protected_keep_alive;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100588};
589
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800590/**
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200591 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800592 *
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700593 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800594 *
Johannes Berg7351c6b2009-11-19 01:08:30 +0100595 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200596 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
597 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
598 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
599 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
600 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
601 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
602 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
603 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
604 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
605 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
606 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200607 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200608 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
609 * station
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200610 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200611 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
612 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200613 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200614 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
Johannes Bergab5b5342009-08-07 16:28:09 +0200615 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
616 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
617 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
618 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
619 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
620 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
621 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
622 * hardware queue.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200623 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
624 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
625 * is for the whole aggregation.
Ron Rindjunsky429a3802008-07-01 14:16:03 +0300626 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
627 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200628 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
629 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
630 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600631 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
632 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
633 * off-channel operation.
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100634 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
635 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
636 * it can be sent out.
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200637 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
638 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200639 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
640 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100641 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
642 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
643 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200644 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
645 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
646 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
647 * queue gets full.
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100648 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
649 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
650 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100651 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
652 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
653 * should kick the MLME state machine.
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200654 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
655 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
656 * status to user space)
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400657 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200658 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
659 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
Johannes Berg610dbc92011-01-06 22:36:44 +0100660 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
661 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
662 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
663 * handled properly by the device.
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200664 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
665 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
666 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530667 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
668 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
669 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200670 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
671 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
672 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
Johannes Bergdeeaee192011-09-29 16:04:35 +0200673 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
674 * PS-Poll responses.
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530675 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
676 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
677 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200678 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
679 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
680 * monitor injection).
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530681 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
682 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
683 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
684 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
685 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200686 *
687 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
688 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800689 */
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200690enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200691 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200692 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
693 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
694 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
695 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
696 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
697 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
698 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
699 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
700 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
701 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
702 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
703 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600704 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100705 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200706 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200707 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100708 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200709 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100710 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100711 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200712 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400713 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200714 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +0100715 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200716 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530717 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200718 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530719 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200720 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530721 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200722};
723
Johannes Bergabe37c42010-06-07 11:12:27 +0200724#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
725
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200726/**
727 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
728 *
729 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
730 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530731 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
732 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
Sven Eckelmanndfdfc2b2016-01-26 17:11:13 +0100733 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +0100734 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
Toke Høiland-Jørgensenbb42f2d2016-09-22 19:04:20 +0200735 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200736 *
737 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
738 */
739enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
740 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530741 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1),
Sven Eckelmanndfdfc2b2016-01-26 17:11:13 +0100742 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2),
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +0100743 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3),
Toke Høiland-Jørgensenbb42f2d2016-09-22 19:04:20 +0200744 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4),
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200745};
746
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200747/*
748 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
749 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
750 */
751#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
752 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
753 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
754 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
755 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100756 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200757 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200758 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200759
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530760/**
761 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
762 * Rate Control algorithm.
763 *
764 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
765 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
766 *
767 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
768 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
769 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
770 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
771 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100772 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
773 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530774 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
775 * Greenfield mode.
776 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100777 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
778 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
779 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530780 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
781 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
782 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
783 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
784 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200785enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
786 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
787 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
788 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
789
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100790 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200791 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
792 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
793 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
794 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
795 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100796 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
797 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
798 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800799};
800
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200801
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200802/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
803#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200804
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200805/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
806#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
807
808/* maximum number of rate stages */
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200809#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200810
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200811/* maximum number of rate table entries */
812#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
813
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200814/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200815 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200816 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200817 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
818 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
Johannes Berge25cf4a2008-10-23 08:51:20 +0200819 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200820 *
821 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
822 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
823 *
824 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
825 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200826 *
827 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
828 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
829 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
830 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300831 * information::
832 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200833 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300834 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200835 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
836 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
837 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
838 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300839 * information should then contain::
840 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200841 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300842 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200843 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
844 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200845 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200846struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
847 s8 idx;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100848 u16 count:5,
849 flags:11;
Gustavo F. Padovan3f30fc12010-07-21 10:59:58 +0000850} __packed;
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200851
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100852#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
853
854static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
855 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
856{
857 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200858 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
859 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100860}
861
862static inline u8
863ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
864{
865 return rate->idx & 0xF;
866}
867
868static inline u8
869ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
870{
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200871 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100872}
873
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200874/**
875 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200876 *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200877 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
878 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
879 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
880 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
881 *
882 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200883 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200884 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100885 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700886 * @control: union for control data
887 * @status: union for status data
888 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100889 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700890 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100891 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700892 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200893 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200894 */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200895struct ieee80211_tx_info {
896 /* common information */
897 u32 flags;
898 u8 band;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200899
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200900 u8 hw_queue;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100901
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100902 u16 ack_frame_id;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100903
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200904 union {
905 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200906 union {
907 /* rate control */
908 struct {
909 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
910 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
911 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200912 u8 use_rts:1;
913 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200914 u8 short_preamble:1;
915 u8 skip_table:1;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200916 /* 2 bytes free */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200917 };
918 /* only needed before rate control */
919 unsigned long jiffies;
920 };
Johannes Berg25d834e2008-09-12 22:52:47 +0200921 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
Johannes Berg53168212017-06-22 12:20:30 +0200922 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200923 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200924 u32 flags;
Johannes Berg53168212017-06-22 12:20:30 +0200925 codel_time_t enqueue_time;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200926 } control;
927 struct {
Johannes Berg3b79af92015-06-01 23:14:59 +0200928 u64 cookie;
929 } ack;
930 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200931 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Eliad Pellera0f995a2014-03-13 14:30:47 +0200932 s32 ack_signal;
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200933 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100934 u8 ampdu_len;
Johannes Bergd748b462012-03-28 11:04:23 +0200935 u8 antenna;
Johannes Berg02219b32014-10-07 10:38:50 +0300936 u16 tx_time;
937 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200938 } status;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200939 struct {
940 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
941 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200942 u8 pad[4];
943
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200944 void *rate_driver_data[
945 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
946 };
947 void *driver_data[
948 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200949 };
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700950};
951
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +0300952/**
Felix Fietkau18fb84d2017-04-26 17:11:35 +0200953 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx staus info for rate control
954 *
955 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
956 * @info: Basic tx status information
957 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
958 */
959struct ieee80211_tx_status {
960 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
961 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
962 struct sk_buff *skb;
963};
964
965/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200966 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
967 *
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +0200968 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
969 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
970 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200971 *
972 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
973 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
974 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
975 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
976 */
977struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +0200978 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
979 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200980 const u8 *common_ies;
981 size_t common_ie_len;
982};
983
984
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200985static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
986{
987 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
988}
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400989
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +0200990static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
991{
992 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
993}
994
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200995/**
996 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
997 *
998 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
999 *
1000 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
1001 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
1002 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
1003 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
1004 *
1005 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
1006 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
1007 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
1008 */
1009static inline void
1010ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1011{
1012 int i;
1013
1014 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1015 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1016 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1017 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1018 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1019 /* clear the rate counts */
1020 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1021 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1022
1023 BUILD_BUG_ON(
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +02001024 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001025 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
1026 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
1027 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
1028}
1029
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001030
1031/**
1032 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1033 *
1034 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1035 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1036 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1037 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001038 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1039 * verification has been done by the hardware.
David Spinadelcef0acd2016-11-21 16:58:40 +02001040 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001041 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1042 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
Johannes Berg981d94a2015-06-12 14:39:02 +02001043 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1044 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1045 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1046 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
Luis de Bethencourt84ea3a182016-03-18 16:09:29 +00001047 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1048 * de-duplication by itself.
Johannes Berg72abd812007-09-17 01:29:22 -04001049 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1050 * the frame.
1051 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1052 * the frame.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001053 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
Johannes Berg6ebacbb2011-02-23 15:06:08 +01001054 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1055 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1056 * merging.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001057 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1058 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1059 * (including FCS) was received.
Johannes Bergf4a0f0c2016-01-25 15:46:34 +02001060 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1061 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
Felix Fietkaufe8431f2012-03-01 18:00:07 +01001062 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1063 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001064 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1065 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1066 * each A-MPDU
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001067 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1068 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
1069 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1070 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1071 * on this subframe
1072 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1073 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
Sara Sharonf980ebc2016-02-24 11:49:45 +02001074 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1075 * done by the hardware
Grzegorz Bajorski17883042015-12-11 14:39:46 +01001076 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1077 * processing it in any regular way.
1078 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1079 * them for sniffing purposes.
1080 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1081 * monitor interfaces.
1082 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1083 * them for sniffing purposes.
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +02001084 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1085 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1086 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1087 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1088 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1089 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1090 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1091 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1092 * interleaved with other frames.
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001093 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1094 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1095 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
Sara Sharonf631a772016-05-03 15:59:44 +03001096 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1097 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1098 * the first subframe.
David Spinadelcef0acd2016-11-21 16:58:40 +02001099 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1100 * be done in the hardware.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001101 */
1102enum mac80211_rx_flags {
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001103 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
1104 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
Johannes Bergf4a0f0c2016-01-25 15:46:34 +02001105 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001106 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
1107 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
1108 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
1109 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001110 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001111 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(8),
1112 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(9),
1113 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(10),
1114 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(11),
1115 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(12),
1116 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(13),
1117 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(14),
1118 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(15),
1119 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(16),
1120 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(17),
1121 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(18),
1122 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(19),
1123 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(20),
1124 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT(21),
1125 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT(22),
1126 RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED = BIT(23),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001127};
1128
1129/**
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001130 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001131 *
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001132 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001133 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1134 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1135 * if the driver fills this value it should add
1136 * %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1137 * to hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact
1138 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1139 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001140 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001141 */
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001142enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1143 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergda6a4352017-04-26 12:14:59 +02001144 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(2),
1145 RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(3),
1146 RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1147 RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(6),
1148 RX_ENC_FLAG_BF = BIT(7),
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001149};
1150
Johannes Bergda6a4352017-04-26 12:14:59 +02001151#define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 4
1152
1153enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1154 RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
1155 RX_ENC_HT,
1156 RX_ENC_VHT,
1157};
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001158
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001159/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001160 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1161 *
1162 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1163 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02001164 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001165 *
Bruno Randolfc132bec2008-02-18 11:20:51 +09001166 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1167 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
Johannes Berg162dd6a2016-02-23 23:05:06 +02001168 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1169 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001170 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1171 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001172 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001173 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
Johannes Berg4352a4d2015-12-08 16:04:35 +02001174 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1175 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001176 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1177 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1178 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001179 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1180 * values were filled.
1181 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1182 * support dB or unspecified units)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001183 * @antenna: antenna used
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +02001184 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001185 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
Johannes Berg8613c942017-04-26 13:51:41 +02001186 * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03001187 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
Johannes Bergda6a4352017-04-26 12:14:59 +02001188 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1189 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001190 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
Johannes Berg554891e2010-09-24 12:38:25 +02001191 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001192 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1193 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1194 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001195 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001196struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1197 u64 mactime;
Johannes Berg162dd6a2016-02-23 23:05:06 +02001198 u64 boottime_ns;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001199 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001200 u32 ampdu_reference;
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001201 u32 flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001202 u16 freq;
Johannes Bergda6a4352017-04-26 12:14:59 +02001203 u8 enc_flags;
1204 u8 encoding:2, bw:3;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001205 u8 rate_idx;
Johannes Berg8613c942017-04-26 13:51:41 +02001206 u8 nss;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001207 u8 rx_flags;
1208 u8 band;
1209 u8 antenna;
1210 s8 signal;
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001211 u8 chains;
1212 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001213 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001214};
1215
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001216/**
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001217 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1218 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1219 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1220 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1221 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1222 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1223 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1224 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1225 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1226 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1227 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1228 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1229 * @data field.
1230 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1231 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1232 * length
1233 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1234 *
1235 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1236 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1237 * data.
1238 */
1239struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1240 u32 present;
1241 u8 align;
1242 u8 oui[3];
1243 u8 subns;
1244 u8 pad;
1245 u16 len;
1246 u8 data[];
1247} __packed;
1248
1249/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001250 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1251 *
1252 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1253 *
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001254 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1255 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1256 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001257 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1258 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1259 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1260 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1261 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1262 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1263 * for more.
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001264 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1265 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1266 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1267 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1268 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001269 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1270 * operating channel.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001271 */
1272enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001273 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
Johannes Bergae5eb022008-10-14 16:58:37 +02001274 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001275 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001276 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001277};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001278
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +02001279
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001280/**
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001281 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1282 *
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001283 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001284 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001285 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001286 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
Johannes Berg47979382009-01-07 10:13:27 +01001287 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001288 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001289 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001290 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001291 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1292 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001293 */
1294enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001295 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001296 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001297 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001298 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001299 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1300 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1301 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001302 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001303};
1304
1305/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001306 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1307 *
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +02001308 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1309 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1310 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1311 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1312 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001313 */
1314enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1315 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1316 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1317 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1318 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1319
1320 /* keep last */
1321 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1322};
1323
1324/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001325 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1326 *
1327 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1328 *
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001329 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1330 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001331 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001332 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1333 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1334 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001335 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1336 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1337 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1338 *
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +02001339 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1340 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001341 *
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001342 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001343 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001344 *
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001345 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001346 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1347 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001348 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001349 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1350 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001351 *
1352 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1353 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001354 * configured for an HT channel.
1355 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1356 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001357 */
1358struct ieee80211_conf {
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001359 u32 flags;
Juuso Oikarinenff616382010-06-09 09:51:52 +03001360 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +02001361
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001362 u16 listen_interval;
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001363 u8 ps_dtim_period;
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001364
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001365 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1366
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001367 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001368 bool radar_enabled;
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001369 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001370};
1371
1372/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001373 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1374 *
1375 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1376 * operation.
1377 *
1378 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1379 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1380 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1381 * the driver passed into mac80211.
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001382 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1383 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001384 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1385 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001386 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001387 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1388 */
1389struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1390 u64 timestamp;
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001391 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001392 bool block_tx;
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001393 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001394 u8 count;
1395};
1396
1397/**
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001398 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1399 *
1400 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1401 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001402 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1403 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1404 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1405 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001406 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1407 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1408 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1409 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comb115b972015-10-27 08:38:40 +01001410 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1411 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1412 * this is not pure P2P vif.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001413 */
1414enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1415 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001416 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001417 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2),
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comb115b972015-10-27 08:38:40 +01001418 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3),
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001419};
1420
1421/**
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001422 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1423 *
1424 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1425 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1426 *
Johannes Berg51fb61e2007-12-19 01:31:27 +01001427 * @type: type of this virtual interface
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001428 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1429 * or the BSS we're associated to
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001430 * @addr: address of this interface
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001431 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1432 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
Michal Kazior59af6922014-04-09 15:10:59 +02001433 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1434 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1435 * for read access.
Sara Sharonb5a33d52016-02-16 12:48:18 +02001436 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001437 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1438 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1439 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1440 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001441 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1442 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001443 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1444 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1445 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1446 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1447 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001448 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001449 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001450 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03001451 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1452 * interface.
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001453 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03001454 * sizeof(void \*).
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001455 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001456 */
1457struct ieee80211_vif {
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001458 enum nl80211_iftype type;
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001459 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
Michael Brauna3e2f4b2016-10-15 13:28:19 +02001460 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001461 bool p2p;
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02001462 bool csa_active;
Sara Sharonb5a33d52016-02-16 12:48:18 +02001463 bool mu_mimo_owner;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001464
1465 u8 cab_queue;
1466 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1467
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001468 struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1469
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001470 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1471
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001472 u32 driver_flags;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001473
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001474#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1475 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1476#endif
1477
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03001478 unsigned int probe_req_reg;
1479
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001480 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001481 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001482};
1483
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001484static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1485{
1486#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001487 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001488#endif
1489 return false;
1490}
1491
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001492/**
Johannes Bergad7e7182013-11-13 13:37:47 +01001493 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1494 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1495 *
1496 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1497 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1498 *
1499 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1500 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1501 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1502 */
1503struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1504
1505/**
Emmanuel Grumbachdc5a1ad2015-03-12 08:53:24 +02001506 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1507 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1508 *
1509 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1510 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1511 *
1512 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1513 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1514 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1515 */
1516struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1517
1518/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001519 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1520 *
1521 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1522 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1523 *
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001524 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1525 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001526 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1527 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001528 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1529 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1530 * generation in software.
Ivo van Doornc6adbd22008-04-17 21:11:18 +02001531 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1532 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001533 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001534 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1535 * (MFP) to be done in software.
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001536 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comee701082012-05-09 08:11:20 +03001537 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001538 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001539 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1540 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1541 * MIC.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001542 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1543 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1544 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1545 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1546 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1547 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1548 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001549 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001550 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001551 * only for managment frames (MFP).
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001552 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1553 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1554 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
David Spinadel9de18d82017-12-01 13:50:52 +02001555 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for
1556 * a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with
1557 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001558 */
1559enum ieee80211_key_flags {
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001560 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
1561 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
1562 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
1563 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
1564 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
1565 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
1566 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001567 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7),
David Spinadel9de18d82017-12-01 13:50:52 +02001568 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE = BIT(8),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001569};
1570
1571/**
1572 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1573 *
1574 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1575 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1576 *
1577 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1578 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001579 * encrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001580 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02001581 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1582 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001583 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1584 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1585 * @keylen: key material length
Luis R. Rodriguezffd78912008-06-21 10:02:46 -04001586 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1587 * data block:
1588 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1589 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1590 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001591 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1592 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001593 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001594struct ieee80211_key_conf {
Johannes Bergdb388a52015-06-01 15:36:51 +02001595 atomic64_t tx_pn;
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001596 u32 cipher;
Felix Fietkau76708de2008-10-05 18:02:48 +02001597 u8 icv_len;
1598 u8 iv_len;
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001599 u8 hw_key_idx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001600 s8 keyidx;
David Spinadel9de18d82017-12-01 13:50:52 +02001601 u16 flags;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001602 u8 keylen;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001603 u8 key[0];
1604};
1605
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001606#define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16
1607
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02001608#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1609#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1610
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001611/**
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001612 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1613 *
1614 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1615 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1616 * reverse order than in packet)
1617 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1618 * reverse order than in packet)
1619 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1620 * reverse order than in packet)
1621 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1622 * reverse order than in packet)
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001623 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001624 */
1625struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1626 union {
1627 struct {
1628 u32 iv32;
1629 u16 iv16;
1630 } tkip;
1631 struct {
1632 u8 pn[6];
1633 } ccmp;
1634 struct {
1635 u8 pn[6];
1636 } aes_cmac;
1637 struct {
1638 u8 pn[6];
1639 } aes_gmac;
1640 struct {
1641 u8 pn[6];
1642 } gcmp;
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001643 struct {
1644 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1645 u8 seq_len;
1646 } hw;
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001647 };
1648};
1649
1650/**
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001651 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1652 *
1653 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1654 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1655 *
1656 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1657 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1658 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1659 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1660 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1661 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1662 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1663 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1664 * key_idx value calculation:
1665 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1666 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1667 */
1668struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1669 u32 cipher;
1670 u16 iftype;
1671 u8 hdr_len;
1672 u8 pn_len;
1673 u8 pn_off;
1674 u8 key_idx_off;
1675 u8 key_idx_mask;
1676 u8 key_idx_shift;
1677 u8 mic_len;
1678};
1679
1680/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001681 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1682 *
1683 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1684 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1685 *
1686 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1687 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1688 */
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001689enum set_key_cmd {
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001690 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001691};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001692
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001693/**
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01001694 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1695 *
1696 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1697 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1698 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1699 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1700 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1701 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1702 */
1703enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1704 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1705 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1706 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1707 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1708 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1709 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1710};
1711
1712/**
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001713 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1714 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1715 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1716 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1717 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1718 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1719 *
1720 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1721 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1722 */
1723enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1724 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1725 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1726 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1727 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1728};
1729
1730/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001731 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1732 *
1733 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001734 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001735 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1736 */
1737struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1738 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1739 struct {
1740 s8 idx;
1741 u8 count;
1742 u8 count_cts;
1743 u8 count_rts;
1744 u16 flags;
1745 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1746};
1747
1748/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001749 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1750 *
1751 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1752 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1753 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1754 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1755 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01001756 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001757 *
1758 * @addr: MAC address
1759 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
Johannes Berg323ce792008-09-11 02:45:11 +02001760 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
Johannes Berg55d942f2013-03-01 13:07:48 +01001761 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1762 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
Maxim Altshul480dd462016-08-22 17:14:04 +03001763 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
1764 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
1765 * Can be modified by driver.
Johannes Berg527871d2015-03-21 08:09:55 +01001766 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
1767 * otherwise always false)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001768 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03001769 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001770 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
Emmanuel Grumbachf438ceb2016-10-18 23:12:12 +03001771 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
1772 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001773 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001774 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001775 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1776 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1777 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1778 * the station moves to associated state.
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001779 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001780 * @rates: rate control selection table
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001781 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001782 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1783 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
Tamizh chelvam93f04902015-10-07 10:40:04 +05301784 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
Emmanuel Grumbach506bcfa2015-12-13 15:41:05 +02001785 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
1786 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
1787 * unlimited.
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +02001788 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01001789 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001790 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001791 */
1792struct ieee80211_sta {
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02001793 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001794 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1795 u16 aid;
Johannes Bergd9fe60d2008-10-09 12:13:49 +02001796 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
Mahesh Palivela818255e2012-10-10 11:33:04 +00001797 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
Maxim Altshul480dd462016-08-22 17:14:04 +03001798 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Arik Nemtsov39df6002011-06-27 23:58:45 +03001799 bool wme;
Eliad Peller9533b4a2011-08-23 14:37:47 +03001800 u8 uapsd_queues;
1801 u8 max_sp;
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001802 u8 rx_nss;
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001803 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001804 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001805 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001806 bool tdls;
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001807 bool tdls_initiator;
Tamizh chelvam93f04902015-10-07 10:40:04 +05301808 bool mfp;
Emmanuel Grumbach506bcfa2015-12-13 15:41:05 +02001809 u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
Johannes Berg57eeb202017-01-13 11:12:01 +01001810
1811 /**
1812 * @max_amsdu_len:
1813 * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
1814 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
1815 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
1816 *
1817 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
1818 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
1819 * * If the skb is not part of a BA aggreement, the A-MSDU maximal
1820 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
1821 *
1822 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
1823 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
1824 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
1825 */
Emmanuel Grumbach506bcfa2015-12-13 15:41:05 +02001826 u16 max_amsdu_len;
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +02001827 bool support_p2p_ps;
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01001828 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001829
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001830 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
1831
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001832 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001833 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001834};
1835
1836/**
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001837 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
1838 *
1839 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
Sujith38a6cc72010-05-19 11:32:30 +05301840 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001841 *
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001842 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
1843 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
1844 */
Christian Lamparter89fad572008-12-09 16:28:06 +01001845enum sta_notify_cmd {
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001846 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
1847};
1848
1849/**
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02001850 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
1851 *
1852 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
1853 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
1854 */
1855struct ieee80211_tx_control {
1856 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1857};
1858
1859/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001860 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
1861 *
1862 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
1863 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
1864 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue)
1865 * @ac: the AC for this queue
Johannes Bergf8bdbb52015-05-20 15:04:53 +02001866 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001867 *
1868 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
1869 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
1870 */
1871struct ieee80211_txq {
1872 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1873 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1874 u8 tid;
1875 u8 ac;
1876
1877 /* must be last */
1878 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1879};
1880
1881/**
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001882 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
1883 *
1884 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
1885 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
1886 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
1887 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
1888 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
1889 *
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001890 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
1891 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
1892 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
1893 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
1894 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
1895 * algorithm.
1896 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
1897 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
1898 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
1899 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
1900 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
1901 * CCK frames.
1902 *
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001903 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
1904 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
1905 * the FCS at the end.
1906 *
1907 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
1908 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
1909 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
1910 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
1911 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
1912 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07001913 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001914 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001915 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
1916 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
1917 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
1918 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
1919 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001920 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
1921 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
1922 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
1923 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
1924 *
Tomas Winkler06ff47b2008-06-18 17:53:44 +03001925 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
1926 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
1927 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
Sujith8b30b1f2008-10-24 09:55:27 +05301928 *
1929 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
1930 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
Kalle Valo520eb822008-12-18 23:35:27 +02001931 *
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001932 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
1933 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
1934 *
1935 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
1936 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
1937 * stack support for dynamic PS.
1938 *
1939 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
1940 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
Jouni Malinen4375d082009-01-08 13:32:11 +02001941 *
1942 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
1943 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001944 *
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301945 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
1946 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
1947 * the stack.
1948 *
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001949 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001950 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
1951 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02001952 *
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001953 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
1954 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
1955 * dtim_period).
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001956 *
1957 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
1958 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
1959 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
1960 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
1961 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
1962 * only in that case.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001963 *
1964 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
1965 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
1966 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
1967 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
1968 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
1969 * the PS mode of connected stations.
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001970 *
1971 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
1972 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
1973 * software.
Eliad Peller885bd8e2012-02-02 17:44:55 +02001974 *
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001975 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
1976 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
1977 * active interfaces.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001978 *
Ben Greeare27513f2014-10-22 12:23:03 -07001979 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
1980 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
1981 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
1982 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01001983 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
1984 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
1985 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
1986 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
1987 * supported cipher suites.
1988 *
Johannes Berg17c18bf2015-03-21 15:25:43 +01001989 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
1990 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
1991 * for frames.
1992 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001993 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
1994 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
1995 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
1996 * control for more details.
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001997 *
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001998 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
1999 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
2000 *
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02002001 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
2002 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
2003 * is supported.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01002004 *
2005 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
2006 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03002007 *
Johannes Berg919be622013-10-14 10:05:16 +02002008 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
2009 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
2010 * using aggregation for such frames.)
2011 *
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03002012 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2013 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2014 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2015 * CSA frame.
Luciano Coelho5d52ee82014-02-27 14:33:47 +02002016 *
Ido Yarivc70f59a2014-07-29 15:39:14 +03002017 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2018 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2019 *
Johannes Bergc526a462015-06-02 20:32:00 +02002020 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02002021 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002022 *
Arik Nemtsovb98fb442015-06-10 20:42:59 +03002023 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2024 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2025 *
Emmanuel Grumbach99e7ca42015-08-15 22:39:51 +03002026 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2027 * within A-MPDU.
2028 *
Helmut Schaa35afa582015-09-09 09:46:32 +02002029 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2030 * for sent beacons.
2031 *
Johannes Berg31104892015-10-22 17:35:19 +02002032 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2033 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2034 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2035 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2036 *
Sara Sharon412a6d82015-12-08 19:09:05 +02002037 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2038 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2039 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2040 * timeout.
2041 *
Johannes Bergc9c59622016-03-31 20:02:11 +03002042 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2043 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2044 *
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002045 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2046 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2047 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2048 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2049 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2050 *
2051 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2052 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2053 *
Rajkumar Manoharane8a24cd2016-09-14 12:48:32 +05302054 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2055 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2056 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2057 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2058 *
Sara Sharonf3fe4e92016-10-18 23:12:11 +03002059 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2060 * The stack will not do fragmentation.
2061 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2062 *
Yingying Tange2fb1b82017-10-24 16:51:10 +08002063 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on
2064 * TDLS links.
2065 *
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002066 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04002067 */
2068enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002069 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2070 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2071 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2072 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2073 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2074 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2075 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2076 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2077 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2078 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2079 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2080 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2081 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2082 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2083 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2084 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2085 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2086 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2087 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2088 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2089 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2090 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2091 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2092 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2093 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2094 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2095 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2096 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2097 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
Arik Nemtsovb98fb442015-06-10 20:42:59 +03002098 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
Emmanuel Grumbach99e7ca42015-08-15 22:39:51 +03002099 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
Helmut Schaa35afa582015-09-09 09:46:32 +02002100 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
Johannes Berg31104892015-10-22 17:35:19 +02002101 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
Sara Sharon412a6d82015-12-08 19:09:05 +02002102 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
Johannes Bergc9c59622016-03-31 20:02:11 +03002103 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002104 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2105 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
Rajkumar Manoharane8a24cd2016-09-14 12:48:32 +05302106 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
Sara Sharonf3fe4e92016-10-18 23:12:11 +03002107 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
Yingying Tange2fb1b82017-10-24 16:51:10 +08002108 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA,
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002109
2110 /* keep last, obviously */
2111 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04002112};
2113
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04002114/**
2115 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002116 *
2117 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2118 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2119 *
2120 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2121 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2122 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01002123 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2124 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002125 *
2126 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2127 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002128 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2129 * along with this structure.
2130 *
2131 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2132 *
2133 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2134 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2135 *
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01002136 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2137 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002138 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02002139 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002140 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002141 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002142 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002143 * that HW supports
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002144 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002145 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +02002146 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2147 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2148 *
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01002149 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2150 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2151 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002152 *
2153 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2154 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002155 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2156 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02002157 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2158 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002159 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2160 * within @struct ieee80211_txq.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02002161 *
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02002162 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2163 * can handle.
2164 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2165 * the hw can report back.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002166 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04002167 *
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02002168 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2169 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2170 * aggregation.
2171 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2172 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2173 * it shouldn't be set.
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01002174 *
2175 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
Gregory Greenmanac062192015-11-17 10:24:38 +02002176 * aggregate an HT driver will transmit. Though ADDBA will advertise
2177 * a constant value of 64 as some older APs can crash if the window
2178 * size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N with FW v1.0.07
2179 * build 002 Jun 18 2012).
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002180 *
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002181 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2182 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2183 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002184 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2185 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002186 *
2187 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2188 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03002189 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002190 * adding _BW is supported today.
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002191 *
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002192 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2193 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03002194 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002195 *
Johannes Berg99ee7ca2016-08-29 23:25:17 +03002196 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2197 * 'units_pos' member is set to a non-negative value it must be set to
2198 * a combination of a IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2199 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value, and then the timestamp
2200 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2201 * device_timestamp. If the 'accuracy' member is non-negative, it's put
2202 * into the accuracy radiotap field and the accuracy known flag is set.
2203 *
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002204 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
Johannes Berg680a0da2015-04-13 16:58:25 +02002205 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2206 * other features will be rejected during HW registration.
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002207 *
2208 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2209 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2210 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2211 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2212 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2213 * neither enabled.
2214 *
2215 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2216 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2217 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002218 *
2219 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2220 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2221 * supported by HW.
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03002222 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2223 * device.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04002224 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002225struct ieee80211_hw {
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002226 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002227 struct wiphy *wiphy;
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01002228 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002229 void *priv;
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002230 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002231 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01002232 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002233 int vif_data_size;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002234 int sta_data_size;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02002235 int chanctx_data_size;
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002236 int txq_data_size;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002237 u16 queues;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002238 u16 max_listen_interval;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002239 s8 max_signal;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002240 u8 max_rates;
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02002241 u8 max_report_rates;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002242 u8 max_rate_tries;
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02002243 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01002244 u8 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002245 u8 max_tx_fragments;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002246 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002247 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002248 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
Johannes Berg99ee7ca2016-08-29 23:25:17 +03002249 struct {
2250 int units_pos;
2251 s16 accuracy;
2252 } radiotap_timestamp;
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002253 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002254 u8 uapsd_queues;
2255 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002256 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2257 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03002258 u8 max_nan_de_entries;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002259};
2260
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002261static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2262 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2263{
2264 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2265}
2266#define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2267
2268static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2269 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2270{
2271 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2272}
2273#define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2274
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002275/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02002276 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2277 *
2278 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2279 * @req: cfg80211 request.
2280 */
2281struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2282 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2283
2284 /* Keep last */
2285 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2286};
2287
2288/**
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02002289 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2290 *
2291 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2292 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2293 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2294 * @status: channel-switch response status
2295 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2296 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2297 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2298 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2299 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2300 */
2301struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2302 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2303 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2304 u8 action_code;
2305 u32 status;
2306 u32 timestamp;
2307 u16 switch_time;
2308 u16 switch_timeout;
2309 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2310 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2311};
2312
2313/**
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002314 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2315 *
2316 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2317 *
2318 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2319 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2320 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2321 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2322 * is already used internally by mac80211.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01002323 *
2324 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002325 */
2326struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2327
2328/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002329 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2330 *
2331 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2332 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2333 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002334static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2335{
2336 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2337}
2338
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002339/**
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002340 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002341 *
2342 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2343 * @addr: the address to set
2344 */
Bjorn Andersson538dc902015-12-24 00:33:26 -08002345static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002346{
2347 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2348}
2349
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002350static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2351ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002352 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002353{
Larry Fingeraa331df2012-04-06 16:35:53 -05002354 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002355 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002356 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002357}
2358
2359static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2360ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002361 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002362{
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002363 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002364 return NULL;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002365 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002366}
2367
2368static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2369ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02002370 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002371{
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002372 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002373 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002374 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002375}
2376
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002377/**
Johannes Berg6096de72011-11-04 11:18:10 +01002378 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2379 * @hw: the hardware
2380 * @skb: the skb
2381 *
2382 * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
2383 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2384 */
2385void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2386
2387/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002388 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002389 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002390 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2391 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2392 *
2393 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2394 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002395 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2396 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2397 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002398 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2399 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2400 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002401 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2402 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2403 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2404 *
2405 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2406 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2407 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2408 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2409 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01002410 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2411 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2412 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2413 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2414 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002415 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2416 *
2417 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2418 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2419 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2420 * based on the receive flags.
2421 *
2422 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2423 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2424 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2425 * keys.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002426 *
2427 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2428 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2429 * handler.
2430 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
Lucas De Marchi25985ed2011-03-30 22:57:33 -03002431 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002432 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2433 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002434 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002435 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002436 *
2437 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2438 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2439 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002440 */
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002441
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002442/**
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002443 * DOC: Powersave support
2444 *
2445 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2446 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002447 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2448 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2449 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2450 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2451 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2452 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2453 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2454 * it finds traffic directed to it.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002455 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002456 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2457 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2458 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002459 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2460 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002461 *
2462 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2463 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2464 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002465 *
2466 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2467 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2468 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2469 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002470 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2471 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002472 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002473 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002474 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2475 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2476 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2477 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2478 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2479 * periods.
2480 *
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002481 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002482 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2483 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2484 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2485 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2486 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2487 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2488 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2489 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2490 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2491 *
2492 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01002493 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002494 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002495 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2496 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2497 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2498 *
2499 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2500 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002501 */
2502
2503/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002504 * DOC: Beacon filter support
2505 *
2506 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
Justin P. Mattock42b2aa82011-11-28 20:31:00 -08002507 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002508 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2509 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2510 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2511 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2512 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2513 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01002514 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2515 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002516 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2517 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2518 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2519 *
2520 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2521 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2522 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2523 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2524 *
2525 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2526 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2527 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2528 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03002529 *
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002530 * - a list of information element IDs
2531 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2532 *
2533 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2534 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2535 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2536 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2537 * vendor information elements.
2538 *
2539 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2540 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2541 *
2542 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2543 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2544 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2545 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2546 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2547 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2548 *
2549 *
2550 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2551 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2552 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2553 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2554 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2555 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2556 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2557 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2558 *
2559 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2560 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2561 * signal strength threshold checking.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002562 */
2563
2564/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01002565 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2566 *
2567 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2568 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2569 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2570 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2571 *
2572 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2573 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2574 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2575 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2576 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2577 * hardware flags.
2578 *
2579 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2580 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2581 * turned off otherwise.
2582 *
2583 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2584 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2585 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2586 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2587 */
2588
2589/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002590 * DOC: Frame filtering
2591 *
2592 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2593 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2594 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2595 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2596 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2597 *
2598 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2599 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2600 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2601 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002602 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2603 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2604 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2605 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2606 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2607 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2608 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002609 *
2610 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2611 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2612 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2613 * or dropped.
2614 *
Michael Bueschd0f5afb2008-02-12 20:12:45 +01002615 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2616 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2617 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2618 * the flag, but not clear it.
2619 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2620 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2621 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2622 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2623 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2624 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2625 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2626 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002627 */
2628
2629/**
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002630 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2631 *
2632 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2633 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2634 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2635 *
2636 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2637 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2638 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2639 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2640 * the driver code.
2641 *
2642 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2643 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2644 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2645 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2646 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2647 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2648 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2649 *
2650 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2651 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2652 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2653 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2654 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2655 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2656 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2657 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2658 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2659 * @sta_notify callback.
2660 *
2661 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2662 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2663 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2664 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2665 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2666 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2667 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002668 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002669 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2670 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2671 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2672 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2673 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2674 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2675 *
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002676 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2677 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2678 *
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002679 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2680 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2681 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2682 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2683 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2684 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2685 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2686 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2687 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2688 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2689 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2690 *
2691 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2692 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2693 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2694 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2695 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2696 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2697 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2698 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2699 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2700 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002701 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002702 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2703 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2704 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2705 *
2706 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2707 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2708 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2709 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2710 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002711 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002712 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2713 *
2714 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2715 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2716 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2717 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002718 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
Johannes Bergb77cf4f2014-01-09 00:00:38 +01002719 *
2720 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2721 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2722 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2723 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002724 */
2725
2726/**
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002727 * DOC: HW queue control
2728 *
2729 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2730 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2731 * was problematic for a few reasons:
2732 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2733 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2734 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2735 *
2736 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2737 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2738 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2739 *
2740 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2741 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2742 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
2743 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
2744 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
2745 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
2746 * the hardware queue.
2747 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
2748 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
2749 *
2750 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
2751 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
2752 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
2753 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
2754 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
2755 *
2756 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
2757 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
2758 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
2759 * off-channel queue: 9
2760 *
2761 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
2762 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
2763 *
2764 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
2765 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
2766 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
2767 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
2768 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
2769 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2770 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
2771 *
2772 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
2773 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
2774 *
2775 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2776 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
2777 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
2778 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
2779 */
2780
2781/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002782 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
2783 *
2784 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
2785 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
2786 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
2787 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
2788 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002789 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
2790 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
2791 * multicast address.
2792 *
2793 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
2794 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
2795 *
2796 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
2797 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
2798 *
2799 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
2800 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
2801 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
2802 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
2803 * honour this flag if possible.
2804 *
Johannes Bergdf140462015-04-22 14:40:58 +02002805 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
2806 * station
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002807 *
2808 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002809 *
Jakub Kicinskic2d39552015-06-02 21:10:13 +02002810 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002811 *
2812 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002813 */
2814enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002815 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
2816 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
2817 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
2818 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
2819 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
2820 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002821 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002822 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002823};
2824
2825/**
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002826 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
2827 *
2828 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
2829 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002830 *
2831 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
2832 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02002833 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002834 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
2835 *
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002836 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
2837 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
2838 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002839 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002840 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
2841 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
2842 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
2843 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
2844 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
2845 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
2846 * session is gone and removes the station.
2847 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
2848 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
2849 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
2850 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002851 */
2852enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
2853 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
2854 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002855 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002856 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
2857 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
2858 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002859 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002860};
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002861
2862/**
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02002863 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
2864 *
2865 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
2866 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
2867 * @tid: tid of the BA session
2868 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
2869 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
2870 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
2871 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the
2872 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
2873 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
2874 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
2875 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
2876 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
2877 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
2878 */
2879struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
2880 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
2881 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2882 u16 tid;
2883 u16 ssn;
2884 u8 buf_size;
2885 bool amsdu;
2886 u16 timeout;
2887};
2888
2889/**
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002890 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
2891 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002892 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
2893 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002894 */
2895enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
2896 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002897 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002898};
2899
2900/**
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002901 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
2902 *
2903 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01002904 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
2905 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
2906 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002907 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002908 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
2909 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
2910 * the peer.
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002911 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
2912 * by the peer
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002913 */
2914enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
2915 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
2916 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002917 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002918 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002919};
2920
2921/**
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02002922 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
2923 *
2924 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
2925 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
2926 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
2927 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
2928 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
2929 *
2930 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
2931 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
2932 * for sending managment frames offchannel.
2933 */
2934enum ieee80211_roc_type {
2935 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
2936 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
2937};
2938
2939/**
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02002940 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
2941 *
2942 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
2943 * reconfiguration type was completed.
2944 *
2945 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
2946 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
2947 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
2948 * of wowlan configuration)
2949 */
2950enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
2951 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
2952 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
2953};
2954
2955/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002956 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
2957 *
2958 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
2959 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
2960 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
2961 *
2962 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
2963 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
2964 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
Johannes Bergeefce912008-05-17 00:57:13 +02002965 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002966 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002967 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002968 *
2969 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
2970 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
2971 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
2972 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
2973 * or zero.
2974 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
2975 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
2976 * is added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002977 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002978 *
2979 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
2980 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
2981 * it must turn off frame reception.)
2982 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04002983 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
2984 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002985 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002986 *
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002987 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
2988 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
2989 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
2990 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
2991 * reconfigured at resume time.
Johannes Berg2b4562d2011-07-02 00:02:01 +02002992 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
2993 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
2994 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
2995 * must return 1 from this function.
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002996 *
2997 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
2998 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
2999 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
3000 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
3001 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
3002 *
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02003003 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
3004 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
3005 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
3006 * in suspend().
3007 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003008 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04003009 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003010 * and @stop must be implemented.
3011 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
3012 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
3013 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
3014 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3015 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003016 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003017 *
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02003018 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3019 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3020 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3021 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3022 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3023 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003024 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3025 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3026 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
3027 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3028 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3029 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3030 * MAC address of the device going away.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003031 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003032 *
3033 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3034 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003035 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003036 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003037 *
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003038 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3039 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3040 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3041 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3042 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003043 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3044 * can sleep.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003045 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003046 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3047 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3048 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3049 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003050 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3051 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003052 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003053 *
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03003054 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3055 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3056 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3057 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3058 * which flags are changed.
3059 * This callback can sleep.
3060 *
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07003061 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003062 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003063 *
3064 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003065 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
3066 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01003067 * is enabled.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003068 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003069 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003070 *
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003071 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3072 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3073 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
Kalle Valoeb807fb2010-01-24 14:55:12 +02003074 * The callback must be atomic.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003075 *
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003076 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3077 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3078 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3079 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3080 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3081 *
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003082 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3083 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3084 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3085 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003086 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01003087 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
Kalle Valo9050bdd2009-03-22 21:57:21 +02003088 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3089 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
Johannes Bergde95a542009-04-01 11:58:36 +02003090 * that power save is disabled.
3091 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3092 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3093 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3094 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3095 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3096 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3097 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003098 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003099 *
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003100 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3101 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3102 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3103 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
3104 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3105 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3106 * The callback can sleep.
3107 *
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003108 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3109 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
3110 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3111 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3112 *
3113 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003114 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003115 *
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003116 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3117 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003118 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3119 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3120 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003121 *
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003122 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3123 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3124 * this notification.
3125 * The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003126 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003127 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3128 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003129 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003130 *
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02003131 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3132 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3133 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003134 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003135 *
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003136 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
Sara Sharonf3fe4e92016-10-18 23:12:11 +03003137 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3138 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3139 * should be set as well.
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003140 * The callback can sleep.
3141 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003142 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003143 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003144 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003145 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3146 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3147 *
3148 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003149 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3150 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3151 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3152 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3153 * This callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003154 *
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303155 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3156 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
Johannes Bergc7e9dbc2016-09-14 10:03:00 +02003157 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3158 * callback can sleep.
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303159 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003160 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003161 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3162 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3163 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01003164 *
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003165 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3166 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3167 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3168 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003169 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3170 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3171 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3172 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3173 * The callback can sleep.
3174 *
3175 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3176 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3177 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3178 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3179 * in @sta_state.
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003180 * The callback can sleep.
3181 *
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003182 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3183 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3184 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3185 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3186 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3187 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3188 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003189 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3190 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3191 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003192 *
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003193 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3194 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3195 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3196 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3197 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3198 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3199 * The callback can sleep.
3200 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003201 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
Johannes Bergfe3fa822008-09-08 11:05:09 +02003202 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003203 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003204 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003205 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003206 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01003207 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01003208 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003209 * The callback can sleep.
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01003210 *
3211 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02003212 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01003213 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003214 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003215 *
Pedersen, Thomas354d3812016-09-28 16:56:28 -07003216 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3217 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3218 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3219 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3220 * The callback can sleep.
3221 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003222 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3223 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3224 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3225 * TSF synchronization.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003226 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003227 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003228 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3229 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3230 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003231 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003232 * The callback can sleep.
Ron Rindjunskyd3c990f2007-11-26 16:14:34 +02003233 *
Randy Dunlap4e8998f2010-05-21 11:28:33 -07003234 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3235 *
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003236 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3237 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3238 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003239 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003240 *
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003241 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3242 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003243 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3244 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3245 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003246 *
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003247 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3248 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003249 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berga80f7c02009-12-23 13:15:32 +01003250 *
3251 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003252 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3253 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3254 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3255 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003256 * Note that vif can be NULL.
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003257 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003258 *
3259 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3260 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3261 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3262 * completion of the channel switch.
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003263 *
Bruno Randolf79b1c462010-11-24 14:34:41 +09003264 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3265 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3266 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3267 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3268 *
3269 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003270 *
3271 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3272 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3273 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3274 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3275 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3276 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003277 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003278 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3279 * must be accepted in this case.
3280 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003281 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3282 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003283 *
3284 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3285 *
3286 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303287 *
3288 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3289 * queues before entering power save.
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303290 *
3291 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3292 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3293 * The callback can sleep.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003294 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3295 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +03003296 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003297 *
3298 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3299 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3300 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3301 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09003302 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003303 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3304 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3305 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3306 * more-data bit must always be set.
3307 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3308 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
Johannes Bergdeeaee192011-09-29 16:04:35 +02003309 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3310 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3311 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3312 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3313 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3314 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003315 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3316 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3317 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02003318 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3319 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003320 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003321 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003322 * This callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003323 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3324 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3325 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01003326 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003327 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3328 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3329 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3330 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003331 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003332 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003333 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3334 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3335 * This callback must be atomic.
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003336 *
3337 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3338 *
3339 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3340 *
3341 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3342 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3343 *
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003344 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3345 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3346 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3347 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3348 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3349 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3350 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3351 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3352 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3353 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3354 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3355 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003356 *
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003357 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3358 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3359 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3360 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3361 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3362 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3363 * 2 * (DTIM period).
3364 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
3365 *
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003366 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303367 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003368 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303369 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003370 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3371 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3372 * channel context with different settings
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303373 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003374 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3375 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303376 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003377 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3378 * unbound from vif.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303379 * This callback may sleep.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003380 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3381 * another, as specified in the list of
3382 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3383 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303384 * This callback may sleep.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003385 *
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003386 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3387 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3388 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3389 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3390 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3391 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3392 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003393 *
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003394 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3395 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3396 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3397 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3398 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg8f21b0a2013-01-11 00:28:01 +01003399 *
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003400 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3401 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3402 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003403 *
3404 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3405 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3406 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003407 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003408 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3409 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003410 * 1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003411 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003412 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3413 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003414 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3415 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
Masahiro Yamada9332ef92017-02-27 14:28:47 -08003416 * gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003417 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003418 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3419 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3420 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003421 *
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003422 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3423 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3424 * channel context is bound before this is called.
3425 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02003426 *
3427 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3428 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3429 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003430 *
3431 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3432 * and hardware limits.
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003433 *
3434 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3435 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3436 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3437 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3438 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3439 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3440 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3441 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3442 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003443 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3444 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3445 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3446 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3447 * response template is provided, together with the location of the
3448 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3449 * the function call.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003450 *
3451 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
Sara Sharonf59374e2016-03-02 23:46:14 +02003452 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3453 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3454 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3455 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
Ayala Beker708d50e2016-09-20 17:31:14 +03003456 *
3457 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
3458 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
Ayala Beker5953ff62016-09-20 17:31:19 +03003459 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
3460 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
3461 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
3462 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
3463 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
3464 * changed parameters.
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03003465 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
3466 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
3467 * this call.
3468 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
3469 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
3470 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003471 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003472struct ieee80211_ops {
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02003473 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3474 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3475 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003476 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003477 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003478#ifdef CONFIG_PM
3479 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3480 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg6d525632012-04-04 15:05:25 +02003481 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003482#endif
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003483 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003484 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02003485 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3486 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02003487 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003488 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003489 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02003490 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003491 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3492 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3493 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3494 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergb2abb6e2011-07-19 10:39:53 +02003495
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003496 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3497 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3498
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003499 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Jiri Pirko22bedad32010-04-01 21:22:57 +00003500 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003501 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3502 unsigned int changed_flags,
3503 unsigned int *total_flags,
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003504 u64 multicast);
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03003505 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3506 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3507 unsigned int filter_flags,
3508 unsigned int changed_flags);
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003509 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3510 bool set);
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04003511 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01003512 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04003513 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003514 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergb3fbdcf2010-01-21 11:40:47 +01003515 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3516 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3517 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3518 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003519 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3520 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3521 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003522 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3523 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
Johannes Berga060bbf2010-04-27 11:59:34 +02003524 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02003525 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003526 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3527 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003528 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3529 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3530 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +02003531 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003532 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003533 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003534 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3535 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3536 const u8 *mac_addr);
3537 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3538 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003539 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3540 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02003541 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3542 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3543 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003544 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003545 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003546 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3547 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3548 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3549 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303550#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3551 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3552 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3553 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3554 struct dentry *dir);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303555#endif
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003556 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003557 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003558 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3559 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3560 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3561 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003562 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3563 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3564 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003565 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3566 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3567 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3568 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003569 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3570 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3571 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003572 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3573 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3574 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3575 struct station_info *sinfo);
Eliad Peller8a3a3c82011-10-02 10:15:52 +02003576 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga3304b02012-03-28 11:04:24 +02003577 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003578 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03003579 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3580 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3581 u64 tsf);
Pedersen, Thomas354d3812016-09-28 16:56:28 -07003582 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3583 s64 offset);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03003584 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003585 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg57eeb202017-01-13 11:12:01 +01003586
3587 /**
3588 * @ampdu_action:
3589 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
3590 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
3591 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
3592 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3593 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
3594 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
3595 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
3596 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
3597 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
3598 *
3599 * - ``TX: 1.....7``
3600 * - ``RX: 2....7`` (lost frame #1)
3601 * - ``TX: 8..1...``
3602 *
3603 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
3604 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
3605 *
3606 * - ``TX: 1 or``
3607 * - ``TX: 18 or``
3608 * - ``TX: 81``
3609 *
3610 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
3611 *
3612 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
3613 * The callback can sleep.
3614 */
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003615 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01003616 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02003617 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
Holger Schurig12897232010-04-19 10:23:57 +02003618 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3619 struct survey_info *survey);
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003620 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003621 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003622#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003623 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3624 void *data, int len);
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003625 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3626 struct netlink_callback *cb,
3627 void *data, int len);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003628#endif
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003629 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3630 u32 queues, bool drop);
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003631 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho0f791eb42014-10-08 09:48:40 +03003632 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003633 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Bruno Randolf15d96752010-11-10 12:50:56 +09003634 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3635 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003636
3637 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Eliad Peller49884562012-11-19 17:05:09 +02003638 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003639 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02003640 int duration,
3641 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003642 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003643 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3644 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3645 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303646 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303647 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3648 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003649 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3650 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3651 const struct ieee80211_event *event);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003652
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003653 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3654 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3655 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3656 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3657 bool more_data);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003658 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3659 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3660 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3661 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3662 bool more_data);
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003663
3664 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3665 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3666 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3667 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3668 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3669 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3670 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3671 u32 sset, u8 *data);
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003672
3673 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3674 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003675
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003676 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3677 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3678
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003679 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3680 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3681 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3682 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3683 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3684 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
3685 u32 changed);
3686 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3687 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3688 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3689 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3690 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3691 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003692 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3693 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
3694 int n_vifs,
3695 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003696
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003697 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3698 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003699
3700#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
3701 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3702 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3703 struct inet6_dev *idev);
3704#endif
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003705 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3706 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3707 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003708 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3709 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3710 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003711
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003712 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3713 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3714
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003715 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3716 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Maxim Altshul2439ca02016-08-04 15:43:04 +03003717 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3718 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003719 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3720 int *dbm);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003721
3722 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3723 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3724 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
3725 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003726 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003727 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3728 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3729 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003730 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3731 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3732 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003733
Johannes Berge7881bd52017-12-19 10:11:54 +01003734 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3735 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Sara Sharonf59374e2016-03-02 23:46:14 +02003736 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Ayala Beker708d50e2016-09-20 17:31:14 +03003737
3738 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3739 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3740 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
3741 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3742 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Ayala Beker5953ff62016-09-20 17:31:19 +03003743 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3744 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3745 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03003746 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3747 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3748 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
3749 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3750 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3751 u8 instance_id);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003752};
3753
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003754/**
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003755 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
3756 *
3757 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3758 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3759 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3760 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3761 * @priv_data_len.
3762 *
3763 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3764 * @ops: callbacks for this device
3765 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
3766 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
3767 *
3768 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
3769 */
3770struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
3771 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
3772 const char *requested_name);
3773
3774/**
3775 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003776 *
3777 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3778 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3779 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3780 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3781 * @priv_data_len.
3782 *
3783 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3784 * @ops: callbacks for this device
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003785 *
3786 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003787 */
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003788static inline
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003789struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003790 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
3791{
3792 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
3793}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003794
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003795/**
3796 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
3797 *
Johannes Bergdbbea672008-02-26 14:34:06 +01003798 * You must call this function before any other functions in
3799 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
3800 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003801 *
3802 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003803 *
3804 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003805 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003806int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3807
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003808/**
3809 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
3810 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
3811 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
3812 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
3813 */
3814struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
3815 int throughput;
3816 int blink_time;
3817};
3818
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003819/**
3820 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
3821 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
3822 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
3823 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
3824 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
3825 */
3826enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
3827 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
3828 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
3829 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
3830};
3831
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003832#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003833const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3834const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3835const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3836const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3837const char *
3838__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3839 unsigned int flags,
3840 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3841 unsigned int blink_table_len);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003842#endif
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003843/**
3844 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
3845 *
3846 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3847 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3848 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3849 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3850 *
3851 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003852 *
3853 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003854 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003855static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003856{
3857#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3858 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
3859#else
3860 return NULL;
3861#endif
3862}
3863
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003864/**
3865 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
3866 *
3867 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3868 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3869 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3870 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3871 *
3872 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003873 *
3874 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003875 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003876static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003877{
3878#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3879 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
3880#else
3881 return NULL;
3882#endif
3883}
3884
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003885/**
3886 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
3887 *
3888 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3889 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3890 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3891 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3892 *
3893 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003894 *
3895 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003896 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003897static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003898{
3899#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3900 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
3901#else
3902 return NULL;
3903#endif
3904}
3905
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003906/**
3907 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
3908 *
3909 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3910 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3911 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3912 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3913 *
3914 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003915 *
3916 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003917 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003918static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003919{
3920#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3921 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
3922#else
3923 return NULL;
3924#endif
3925}
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003926
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003927/**
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003928 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
3929 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003930 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003931 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
3932 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
3933 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003934 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
3935 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
3936 *
3937 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003938 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003939static inline const char *
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003940ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003941 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3942 unsigned int blink_table_len)
3943{
3944#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003945 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003946 blink_table_len);
3947#else
3948 return NULL;
3949#endif
3950}
3951
3952/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003953 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
3954 *
3955 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
3956 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
3957 *
3958 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
3959 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003960void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3961
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003962/**
3963 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
3964 *
3965 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
3966 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003967 * before calling this function.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003968 *
3969 * @hw: the hardware to free
3970 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003971void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3972
Johannes Bergf2753dd2009-04-14 10:09:24 +02003973/**
3974 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
3975 *
3976 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
3977 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
3978 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
3979 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
3980 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
3981 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
3982 *
3983 * @hw: the hardware to restart
3984 */
3985void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3986
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003987/**
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003988 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003989 *
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003990 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
3991 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3992 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3993 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3994 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
3995 *
3996 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
3997 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3998 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
3999 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4000 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4001 *
4002 * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
4003 *
4004 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03004005 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02004006 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4007 * @napi: the NAPI context
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04004008 */
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03004009void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4010 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04004011
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004012/**
4013 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
4014 *
4015 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
Zhu Yie3cf8b32010-03-29 17:35:07 +08004016 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4017 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4018 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4019 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004020 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004021 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004022 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4023 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004024 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4025 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004026 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004027 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Bergd20ef632009-10-11 15:10:40 +02004028 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004029 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4030 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004031 */
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02004032static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4033{
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03004034 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02004035}
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004036
4037/**
4038 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4039 *
4040 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004041 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4042 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004043 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004044 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4045 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004046 *
4047 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4048 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004049 */
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02004050void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004051
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004052/**
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004053 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4054 *
4055 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4056 * (internally disables bottom halves).
4057 *
4058 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004059 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4060 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004061 *
4062 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4063 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4064 */
4065static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4066 struct sk_buff *skb)
4067{
4068 local_bh_disable();
4069 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4070 local_bh_enable();
4071}
4072
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004073/**
4074 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4075 *
4076 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4077 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4078 * entering/leaving PS mode.
4079 *
4080 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4081 *
4082 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4083 * each other.
4084 *
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004085 * @sta: currently connected sta
4086 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004087 *
4088 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004089 */
4090int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4091
4092/**
4093 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4094 * (in process context)
4095 *
4096 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4097 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4098 * applies.
4099 *
4100 * @sta: currently connected sta
4101 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004102 *
4103 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004104 */
4105static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4106 bool start)
4107{
4108 int ret;
4109
4110 local_bh_disable();
4111 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4112 local_bh_enable();
4113
4114 return ret;
4115}
4116
Johannes Berg46fa38e2016-05-03 16:58:00 +03004117/**
4118 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4119 * @sta: currently connected station
4120 *
4121 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4122 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4123 * connected station was received.
4124 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4125 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4126 * be serialized.
4127 */
4128void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4129
4130/**
4131 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4132 * @sta: currently connected station
4133 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4134 *
4135 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4136 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4137 * from a connected station was received.
4138 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4139 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4140 * serialized.
Emmanuel Grumbach0aa419e2016-10-18 23:12:10 +03004141 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4142 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4143 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4144 * checks.
Johannes Berg46fa38e2016-05-03 16:58:00 +03004145 */
4146void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4147
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01004148/*
4149 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4150 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4151 */
Helmut Schaa7f2a5e22011-10-11 18:08:55 +02004152#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM 14
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01004153
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004154/**
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004155 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
Randy Dunlapbdfbe802011-05-22 17:22:45 -07004156 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004157 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4158 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004159 *
4160 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004161 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4162 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004163 *
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004164 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4165 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4166 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4167 * call! Beware of the locking!)
4168 *
4169 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4170 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4171 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4172 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4173 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4174 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4175 *
4176 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4177 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4178 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4179 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4180 * use this API.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004181 */
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004182void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4183 u8 tid, bool buffered);
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004184
4185/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02004186 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4187 *
4188 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4189 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4190 * rate selection table for the station entry.
4191 *
4192 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4193 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4194 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4195 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4196 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4197 */
4198void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4199 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4200 struct sk_buff *skb,
4201 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4202 int max_rates);
4203
4204/**
Toke Høiland-Jørgensen484a54c2017-04-06 11:38:26 +02004205 * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
4206 *
4207 * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
4208 * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
4209 * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
4210 * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
4211 * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
4212 * slow stations to starve).
4213 *
4214 * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
4215 * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
4216 */
4217void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4218 u32 thr);
4219
4220/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004221 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4222 *
4223 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4224 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4225 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4226 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004227 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4228 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004229 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004230 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4231 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004232 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004233 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4234 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004235 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004236void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004237 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004238
4239/**
Felix Fietkau5fe49a92017-04-26 17:11:37 +02004240 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
4241 *
4242 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4243 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
4244 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
4245 *
4246 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4247 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4248 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4249 *
4250 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4251 * @status: tx status information
4252 */
4253void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4254 struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
4255
4256/**
Felix Fietkauf027c2a2014-11-19 20:08:13 +01004257 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4258 *
4259 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4260 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4261 * specific skbs.
4262 *
4263 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4264 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4265 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4266 *
4267 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4268 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4269 * (NULL for multicast packets)
4270 * @info: tx status information
4271 */
Felix Fietkau5fe49a92017-04-26 17:11:37 +02004272static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4273 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4274 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
4275{
4276 struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
4277 .sta = sta,
4278 .info = info,
4279 };
4280
4281 ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
4282}
Felix Fietkauf027c2a2014-11-19 20:08:13 +01004283
4284/**
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004285 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4286 *
4287 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4288 *
4289 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4290 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4291 * for a single hardware.
4292 *
4293 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4294 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4295 */
4296static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4297 struct sk_buff *skb)
4298{
4299 local_bh_disable();
4300 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4301 local_bh_enable();
4302}
4303
4304/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004305 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004306 *
4307 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4308 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4309 *
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004310 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4311 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004312 *
4313 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4314 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004315 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004316void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004317 struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004318
4319/**
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03004320 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4321 *
4322 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4323 * connected STA.
4324 *
4325 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4326 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4327 */
4328void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4329
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004330#define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4331
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03004332/**
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004333 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4334 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4335 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
Luciano Coelho8d77ec82014-05-15 20:32:08 +03004336 * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4337 * to CSA counters. This array can contain zero values which
4338 * should be ignored.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004339 */
4340struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4341 u16 tim_offset;
4342 u16 tim_length;
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004343
4344 u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004345};
4346
4347/**
4348 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4349 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4350 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4351 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4352 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4353 *
4354 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4355 * obtain the beacon template.
4356 *
4357 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4358 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004359 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4360 * applicable, the CSA count.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004361 *
4362 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4363 *
4364 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4365 */
4366struct sk_buff *
4367ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4368 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4369 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4370
4371/**
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004372 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4373 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004374 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004375 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4376 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4377 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4378 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
4379 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4380 *
4381 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004382 * obtain the beacon frame.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004383 *
4384 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4385 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004386 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4387 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004388 *
4389 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004390 *
4391 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004392 */
4393struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4394 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4395 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4396
4397/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004398 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4399 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004400 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004401 *
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004402 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004403 *
4404 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004405 */
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004406static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4407 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4408{
4409 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4410}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004411
4412/**
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004413 * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
4414 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4415 *
4416 * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4417 * This function is called implicitly when
4418 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4419 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4420 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
4421 *
4422 * Return: new csa counter value
4423 */
4424u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4425
4426/**
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004427 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4428 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4429 *
4430 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004431 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004432 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4433 */
4434void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4435
4436/**
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004437 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004438 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4439 *
4440 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
4441 */
4442bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4443
4444
4445/**
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004446 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4447 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4448 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4449 *
4450 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4451 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4452 *
4453 * Can only be called in AP mode.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004454 *
4455 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004456 */
4457struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4458 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4459
4460/**
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004461 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4462 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4463 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4464 *
4465 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4466 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4467 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4468 *
4469 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4470 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004471 *
4472 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004473 */
4474struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4475 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4476
4477/**
4478 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4479 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4480 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Berg7b6ddea2017-11-21 14:46:08 +01004481 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set
4482 * if at all possible
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004483 *
4484 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
4485 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4486 * BSSID and address is used.
4487 *
Johannes Berg7b6ddea2017-11-21 14:46:08 +01004488 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the
4489 * returned packet will be QoS NDP.
4490 *
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004491 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4492 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004493 *
4494 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004495 */
4496struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg7b6ddea2017-11-21 14:46:08 +01004497 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4498 bool qos_ok);
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004499
4500/**
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004501 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4502 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004503 * @src_addr: source MAC address
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004504 * @ssid: SSID buffer
4505 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004506 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004507 *
4508 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4509 * hardware.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004510 *
4511 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004512 */
4513struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004514 const u8 *src_addr,
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004515 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004516 size_t tailroom);
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004517
4518/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004519 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
4520 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004521 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004522 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4523 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004524 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004525 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
4526 *
4527 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4528 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4529 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4530 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
4531 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004532void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004533 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004534 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004535 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
4536
4537/**
4538 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
4539 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004540 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004541 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004542 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004543 *
4544 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4545 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4546 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004547 *
4548 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004549 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004550__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4551 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004552 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004553
4554/**
4555 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
4556 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004557 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004558 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4559 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004560 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004561 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
4562 *
4563 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4564 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4565 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4566 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
4567 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004568void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4569 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004570 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004571 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004572 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
4573
4574/**
4575 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
4576 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004577 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004578 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004579 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004580 *
4581 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4582 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4583 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004584 *
4585 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004586 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004587__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4588 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004589 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004590 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004591
4592/**
4593 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
4594 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004595 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02004596 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004597 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004598 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004599 *
4600 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
4601 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004602 *
4603 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004604 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004605__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4606 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02004607 enum nl80211_band band,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004608 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004609 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004610
4611/**
4612 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
4613 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004614 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004615 *
4616 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
4617 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
4618 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
4619 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004620 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
4621 *
4622 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
4623 * frames are available.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004624 *
4625 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
4626 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
4627 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
4628 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
4629 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
4630 * use common code for all beacons.
4631 */
4632struct sk_buff *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004633ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004634
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004635/**
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004636 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
4637 *
4638 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
4639 *
4640 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4641 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4642 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4643 */
4644void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4645 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4646
4647/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004648 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004649 *
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004650 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
4651 * from the given packet.
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004652 *
4653 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004654 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
4655 * with this P1K
4656 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004657 */
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004658static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4659 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
4660{
4661 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
4662 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
4663 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
4664
4665 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
4666}
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004667
4668/**
Johannes Berg8bca5d82011-07-13 19:50:34 +02004669 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
4670 *
4671 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
4672 * and transmitter address.
4673 *
4674 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4675 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
4676 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4677 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4678 */
4679void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4680 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4681
4682/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004683 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
4684 *
4685 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
4686 * in the packet.
4687 *
4688 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4689 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
4690 * encrypted with this key
4691 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
4692 */
4693void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4694 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004695
4696/**
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02004697 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
4698 *
4699 * @pos: start of crypto header
4700 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4701 * @pn: PN to add
4702 *
4703 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
4704 * the packet payload)
4705 *
4706 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
4707 * point to the crypto header)
4708 */
4709u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
4710
4711/**
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004712 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
4713 *
4714 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004715 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004716 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4717 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4718 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4719 *
4720 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
4721 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
4722 * by the device and not by mac80211.
4723 *
4724 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4725 * can be done concurrently.
4726 */
4727void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4728 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4729
4730/**
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004731 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
4732 *
4733 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004734 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004735 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4736 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4737 * @seq: new sequence data
4738 *
4739 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
4740 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
4741 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
4742 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
4743 *
4744 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4745 * can be done concurrently.
4746 */
4747void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4748 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4749
4750/**
4751 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
4752 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4753 *
4754 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
4755 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
4756 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
4757 *
4758 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
4759 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
4760 */
4761void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4762
4763/**
4764 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
4765 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
4766 * @keyconf: new key data
4767 *
4768 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
4769 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
4770 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
4771 *
4772 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
4773 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
4774 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
4775 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
4776 *
4777 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
4778 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
4779 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
4780 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
4781 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
4782 * of the reconfiguration.
4783 *
4784 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
4785 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
4786 *
4787 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
4788 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
4789 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
4790 * the key that's being replaced.
4791 */
4792struct ieee80211_key_conf *
4793ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4794 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4795
4796/**
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004797 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
4798 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
4799 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
4800 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
4801 * @gfp: allocation flags
4802 */
4803void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
4804 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
4805
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004806/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004807 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
4808 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4809 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4810 *
4811 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4812 */
4813void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4814
4815/**
4816 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
4817 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4818 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4819 *
4820 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4821 */
4822void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4823
4824/**
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004825 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
4826 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4827 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4828 *
4829 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004830 *
4831 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004832 */
4833
4834int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4835
4836/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004837 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
4838 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4839 *
4840 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4841 */
4842void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4843
4844/**
4845 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
4846 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4847 *
4848 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4849 */
4850void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4851
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004852/**
4853 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
4854 *
4855 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
4856 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
Johannes Berg8789d452010-08-26 13:30:26 +02004857 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
4858 * any context, including hardirq context.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004859 *
4860 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
Avraham Stern7947d3e2016-07-05 15:23:12 +03004861 * @info: information about the completed scan
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004862 */
Avraham Stern7947d3e2016-07-05 15:23:12 +03004863void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4864 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004865
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004866/**
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03004867 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
4868 *
4869 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
4870 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
4871 *
4872 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4873 */
4874void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4875
4876/**
4877 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
4878 *
4879 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
4880 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
4881 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
4882 * while associating, for instance.
4883 *
4884 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4885 */
4886void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4887
4888/**
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004889 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
4890 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
4891 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
4892 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
4893 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
4894 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
4895 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
4896 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004897 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004898 */
4899enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
4900 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
4901 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004902 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004903};
4904
4905/**
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004906 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
4907 *
4908 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4909 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
4910 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
4911 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
4912 *
4913 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4914 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4915 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
4916 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4917 */
4918void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4919 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4920 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4921 void *data);
4922
4923/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004924 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004925 *
4926 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4927 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004928 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
4929 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
4930 * be used.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004931 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004932 *
4933 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004934 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004935 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004936 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4937 */
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004938static inline void
4939ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4940 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4941 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4942 void *data)
4943{
4944 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
4945 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
4946 iterator, data);
4947}
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004948
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004949/**
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004950 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
4951 *
4952 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4953 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4954 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4955 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004956 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004957 *
4958 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004959 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004960 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4961 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4962 */
4963void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004964 u32 iter_flags,
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004965 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4966 u8 *mac,
4967 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4968 void *data);
4969
4970/**
Johannes Bergc7c71062013-08-21 22:07:20 +02004971 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
4972 *
4973 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4974 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4975 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
4976 *
4977 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4978 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4979 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4980 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4981 */
4982void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4983 u32 iter_flags,
4984 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4985 u8 *mac,
4986 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4987 void *data);
4988
4989/**
Arik Nemtsov0fc1e042014-10-22 12:30:59 +03004990 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
4991 *
4992 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
4993 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
4994 * function for them.
4995 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4996 *
4997 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4998 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4999 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5000 */
5001void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5002 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5003 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5004 void *data);
5005/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04005006 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5007 *
5008 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
5009 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
5010 *
5011 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5012 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
5013 */
5014void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
5015
5016/**
5017 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5018 *
5019 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
5020 * workqueue.
5021 *
5022 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5023 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
5024 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
5025 */
5026void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5027 struct delayed_work *dwork,
5028 unsigned long delay);
5029
5030/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005031 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01005032 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005033 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05305034 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07005035 *
5036 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005037 *
5038 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5039 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5040 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5041 */
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05305042int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
5043 u16 timeout);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005044
5045/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005046 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01005047 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005048 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5049 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5050 *
5051 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02005052 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
5053 * from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005054 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01005055void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005056 u16 tid);
5057
5058/**
5059 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01005060 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005061 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07005062 *
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02005063 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005064 *
5065 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5066 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5067 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5068 */
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02005069int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005070
5071/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005072 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01005073 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005074 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5075 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
5076 *
5077 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02005078 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
5079 * can be called from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005080 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01005081void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005082 u16 tid);
5083
Mohamed Abbas84363e62008-04-04 16:59:58 -07005084/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005085 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
5086 *
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005087 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005088 * @addr: station's address
5089 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005090 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5091 *
5092 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005093 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5094 */
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005095struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005096 const u8 *addr);
5097
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005098/**
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005099 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005100 *
5101 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005102 * @addr: remote station's address
5103 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005104 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005105 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5106 *
5107 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005108 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5109 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005110 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
5111 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
5112 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
5113 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
5114 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
5115 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
5116 * is not reliable.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005117 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005118 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005119 */
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005120struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5121 const u8 *addr,
5122 const u8 *localaddr);
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005123
5124/**
Johannes Bergaf818582009-11-06 11:35:50 +01005125 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
5126 * @hw: the hardware
5127 * @pubsta: the station
5128 * @block: whether to block or unblock
5129 *
5130 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
5131 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
5132 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
5133 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
5134 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
5135 *
5136 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
5137 * manner.
5138 *
5139 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
5140 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
5141 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
5142 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
5143 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
5144 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
5145 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
5146 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
5147 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
5148 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
5149 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
5150 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
5151 * woke up while blocked or not.
5152 */
5153void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5154 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
5155
5156/**
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02005157 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
5158 * @pubsta: the station
5159 *
5160 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
5161 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
5162 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
5163 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
5164 *
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01005165 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
5166 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
5167 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
5168 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
5169 *
5170 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
5171 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
5172 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
5173 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02005174 */
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01005175void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02005176
5177/**
Emmanuel Grumbach0ead2512015-11-17 10:24:36 +02005178 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
5179 * @pubsta: the station
5180 * @tid: the tid of the NDP
5181 *
5182 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
5183 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
5184 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
5185 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
5186 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
5187 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
5188 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
5189 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
5190 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
5191 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
5192 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
5193 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
5194 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
5195 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
5196 */
5197void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5198
5199/**
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02005200 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5201 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5202 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5203 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5204 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5205 *
5206 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5207 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5208 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5209 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5210 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
5211 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
Johannes Bergf850e002011-07-13 19:50:53 +02005212 *
5213 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
5214 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
5215 * set_key callback.
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02005216 */
5217void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5218 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5219 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5220 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5221 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5222 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5223 void *data),
5224 void *iter_data);
5225
5226/**
Eliad Pelleref044762015-11-17 10:24:37 +02005227 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
5228 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5229 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5230 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5231 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5232 *
5233 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5234 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5235 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
5236 * in removal process will be skipped.
5237 *
5238 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
5239 * and thus iter must be atomic.
5240 */
5241void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5242 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5243 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5244 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5245 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5246 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5247 void *data),
5248 void *iter_data);
5249
5250/**
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02005251 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5252 * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5253 * @iter: iterator function
5254 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5255 *
5256 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5257 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5258 * places while calling into the driver.
5259 *
5260 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5261 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5262 * removed.
Johannes Berg8a61af62012-12-13 17:42:30 +01005263 *
5264 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5265 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5266 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5267 * or not.
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02005268 */
5269void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5270 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5271 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5272 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
5273 void *data),
5274 void *iter_data);
5275
5276/**
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02005277 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5278 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5279 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5280 *
5281 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5282 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
5283 * information. This function must only be called from within the
5284 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
5285 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005286 * %NULL.
5287 *
5288 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02005289 */
5290struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5291 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5292
5293/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005294 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
5295 *
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01005296 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005297 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01005298 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005299 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005300 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
5301 */
5302void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005303
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005304/**
5305 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
5306 *
5307 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5308 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01005309 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005310 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
5311 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
Johannes Berg682bd382013-01-29 13:13:50 +01005312 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
5313 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005314 *
5315 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
5316 * without connection recovery attempts.
5317 */
5318void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5319
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005320/**
Johannes Berg95acac62011-07-12 12:30:59 +02005321 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
5322 *
5323 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5324 *
5325 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
5326 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
5327 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
5328 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
5329 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
5330 *
5331 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
5332 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
5333 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
5334 * disconnect normally later.
5335 *
5336 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
5337 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
5338 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
5339 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
5340 */
5341void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5342
5343/**
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005344 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
5345 * rssi threshold triggered
5346 *
5347 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5348 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
Andrzej Zaborowski769f07d2017-01-25 12:43:40 +01005349 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005350 * @gfp: context flags
5351 *
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01005352 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005353 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
5354 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
5355 */
5356void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5357 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
Andrzej Zaborowski769f07d2017-01-25 12:43:40 +01005358 s32 rssi_level,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005359 gfp_t gfp);
5360
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02005361/**
Johannes Berg98f03342014-11-26 12:42:02 +01005362 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
5363 *
5364 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5365 * @gfp: context flags
5366 */
5367void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
5368
5369/**
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01005370 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
5371 *
5372 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5373 */
5374void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5375
5376/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02005377 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
5378 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5379 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
5380 *
5381 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
5382 * and wake up the suspended queues.
5383 */
5384void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
5385
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02005386/**
5387 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
5388 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Berg633dd1e2010-08-18 15:01:23 +02005389 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02005390 *
5391 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
5392 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
5393 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
5394 */
5395void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5396 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
5397
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02005398/**
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01005399 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
5400 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5401 */
5402void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5403
5404/**
5405 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
5406 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5407 */
5408void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5409
Shahar Levif41ccd72011-05-22 16:10:21 +03005410/**
5411 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
5412 *
5413 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
5414 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
5415 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
5416 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5417 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5418 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5419 *
5420 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5421 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
5422 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
5423 */
5424void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
5425 const u8 *addr);
5426
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02005427/**
Sara Sharon06470f72016-01-28 16:19:25 +02005428 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
5429 * @pubsta: station struct
5430 * @tid: the session's TID
5431 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
5432 * assumed to be out of the window after the call
5433 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
5434 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
5435 *
5436 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
5437 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
5438 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
5439 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
5440 */
5441void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5442 u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
5443 u16 received_mpdus);
5444
5445/**
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02005446 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
5447 *
5448 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
5449 * buffer.
5450 *
5451 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5452 * @ra: the peer's destination address
5453 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
5454 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
5455 */
5456void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
5457
Luca Coelho1272c5d2017-08-18 15:33:56 +03005458/**
5459 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work
5460 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5461 * @addr: station mac address
5462 * @tid: the rx tid
5463 */
Johannes Berg699cb582017-05-30 16:34:46 +02005464void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
Luca Coelho1272c5d2017-08-18 15:33:56 +03005465 unsigned int tid);
Johannes Berg699cb582017-05-30 16:34:46 +02005466
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02005467/**
5468 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
5469 *
5470 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5471 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5472 * reordering.
5473 *
5474 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5475 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
5476 *
5477 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5478 * @addr: station mac address
5479 * @tid: the rx tid
5480 */
Johannes Berg699cb582017-05-30 16:34:46 +02005481static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5482 const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5483{
5484 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5485 return;
5486 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
5487}
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02005488
5489/**
5490 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
5491 *
5492 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5493 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5494 * reordering.
5495 *
5496 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5497 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
5498 *
5499 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5500 * @addr: station mac address
5501 * @tid: the rx tid
5502 */
Johannes Berg699cb582017-05-30 16:34:46 +02005503static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5504 const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5505{
5506 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5507 return;
5508 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
5509}
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02005510
Naftali Goldstein04c2cf32017-07-11 10:07:25 +03005511/**
5512 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout
5513 *
5514 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx
5515 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer.
5516 *
5517 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa.
5518 *
5519 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5520 * @addr: station mac address
5521 * @tid: the rx tid
5522 */
5523void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5524 const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid);
5525
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005526/* Rate control API */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005527
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005528/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005529 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005530 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005531 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
5532 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
5533 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005534 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
5535 * to be filled in
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005536 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
5537 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
5538 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
5539 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
5540 * RTS threshold
5541 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
5542 * if the selected rate supports it
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005543 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005544 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005545 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005546 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005547struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
5548 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
5549 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
5550 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
5551 struct sk_buff *skb;
5552 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
5553 bool rts, short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02005554 u32 rate_idx_mask;
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005555 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005556 bool bss;
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005557};
5558
5559struct rate_control_ops {
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005560 const char *name;
5561 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005562 void (*free)(void *priv);
5563
5564 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
5565 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005566 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005567 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
Sujith81cb7622009-02-12 11:38:37 +05305568 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005569 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg64f68e52012-03-28 10:58:37 +02005570 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5571 u32 changed);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005572 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5573 void *priv_sta);
5574
Felix Fietkau18fb84d2017-04-26 17:11:35 +02005575 void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
5576 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5577 void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005578 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5579 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5580 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005581 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5582 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005583
5584 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
5585 struct dentry *dir);
5586 void (*remove_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02005587
5588 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005589};
5590
5591static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02005592 enum nl80211_band band,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005593 int index)
5594{
5595 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
5596}
5597
Luis R. Rodriguez4c6d4f52009-07-16 10:05:41 -07005598/**
5599 * rate_control_send_low - helper for drivers for management/no-ack frames
5600 *
5601 * Rate control algorithms that agree to use the lowest rate to
5602 * send management frames and NO_ACK data with the respective hw
5603 * retries should use this in the beginning of their mac80211 get_rate
5604 * callback. If true is returned the rate control can simply return.
5605 * If false is returned we guarantee that sta and sta and priv_sta is
5606 * not null.
5607 *
5608 * Rate control algorithms wishing to do more intelligent selection of
5609 * rate for multicast/broadcast frames may choose to not use this.
5610 *
5611 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. Note
5612 * that this may be null.
5613 * @priv_sta: private rate control structure. This may be null.
5614 * @txrc: rate control information we sholud populate for mac80211.
5615 */
5616bool rate_control_send_low(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5617 void *priv_sta,
5618 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
5619
5620
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005621static inline s8
5622rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5623 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5624{
5625 int i;
5626
5627 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5628 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5629 return i;
5630
5631 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005632 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005633
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005634 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005635 return 0;
5636}
5637
Luis R. Rodriguezb770b432009-07-16 10:15:09 -07005638static inline
5639bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5640 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5641{
5642 unsigned int i;
5643
5644 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5645 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5646 return true;
5647 return false;
5648}
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005649
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02005650/**
5651 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
5652 *
5653 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
5654 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
5655 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
5656 * the most recent rate control module decision.
5657 *
5658 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5659 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
5660 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
5661 */
5662int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5663 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
5664 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
5665
Johannes Berg631ad702014-01-20 23:29:34 +01005666int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
5667void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005668
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005669static inline bool
5670conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5671{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005672 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005673}
5674
5675static inline bool
5676conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5677{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005678 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5679 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005680}
5681
5682static inline bool
5683conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5684{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005685 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5686 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005687}
5688
5689static inline bool
5690conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5691{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005692 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005693}
5694
5695static inline bool
5696conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5697{
Rostislav Lisovy041f6072014-04-02 15:31:55 +02005698 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
5699 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
5700 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005701}
5702
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02005703static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5704ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
5705{
5706 if (p2p) {
5707 switch (type) {
5708 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
5709 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
5710 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
5711 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
5712 default:
5713 break;
5714 }
5715 }
5716 return type;
5717}
5718
5719static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5720ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
5721{
5722 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
5723}
5724
Sara Sharon65554d02016-02-16 12:48:17 +02005725/**
5726 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
5727 *
5728 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5729 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
5730 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
5731 *
5732 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
5733 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
5734 * matching GroupId management frame.
5735 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
5736 */
5737void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5738 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
5739
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07005740void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5741 int rssi_min_thold,
5742 int rssi_max_thold);
5743
5744void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Arik Nemtsov768db342011-09-28 14:12:51 +03005745
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005746/**
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005747 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005748 *
5749 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5750 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005751 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
5752 *
5753 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
5754 * applicable.
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005755 */
Wey-Yi Guy1dae27f2012-04-13 12:02:57 -07005756int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5757
Johannes Bergcd8f7cb2013-01-22 12:34:29 +01005758/**
5759 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
5760 * @vif: virtual interface
5761 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
5762 * @gfp: allocation flags
5763 *
5764 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
5765 */
5766void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5767 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
5768 gfp_t gfp);
5769
Felix Fietkau06be6b12013-10-14 18:01:00 +02005770/**
5771 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
5772 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5773 * @vif: virtual interface
5774 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
5775 * @band: the band to transmit on
5776 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
5777 *
5778 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
5779 */
5780bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5781 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
5782 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
5783
Felix Fietkaua7022e62013-12-16 21:49:14 +01005784/**
5785 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
5786 *
5787 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
5788 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
5789 *
5790 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
5791 *
5792 * private:
5793 *
5794 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
5795 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
5796 */
5797struct ieee80211_noa_data {
5798 u32 next_tsf;
5799 bool has_next_tsf;
5800
5801 u8 absent;
5802
5803 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5804 struct {
5805 u32 start;
5806 u32 duration;
5807 u32 interval;
5808 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5809};
5810
5811/**
5812 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
5813 *
5814 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
5815 * @data: NoA tracking data
5816 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5817 *
5818 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
5819 */
5820int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
5821 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5822
5823/**
5824 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
5825 *
5826 * @data: NoA tracking data
5827 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5828 */
5829void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5830
Arik Nemtsovc887f0d32014-06-11 17:18:25 +03005831/**
5832 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
5833 * @vif: virtual interface
5834 * @peer: the peer's destination address
5835 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
5836 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
5837 * @gfp: allocation flags
5838 *
5839 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
5840 */
5841void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
5842 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
5843 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
Andrei Otcheretianskia7f3a762014-10-22 15:22:49 +03005844
5845/**
Liad Kaufmanb6da9112014-11-19 13:47:38 +02005846 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
5847 *
5848 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
5849 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
5850 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
5851 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
5852 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
5853 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
5854 *
5855 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
5856 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
5857 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5858 *
5859 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
5860 * @tid: the TID to reserve
5861 *
5862 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
5863 */
5864int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5865
5866/**
5867 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
5868 *
5869 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
5870 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
5871 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
5872 *
5873 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
5874 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
5875 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5876 *
5877 * @sta: the station
5878 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
5879 */
5880void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5881
5882/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01005883 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
5884 *
5885 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Johannes Berge7881bd52017-12-19 10:11:54 +01005886 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01005887 *
5888 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
5889 */
5890struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5891 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Michal Kaziorf2ac7e302016-01-27 15:26:12 +01005892
5893/**
5894 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
5895 *
5896 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
5897 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
5898 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
5899 *
5900 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5901 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
5902 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
5903 */
5904void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
5905 unsigned long *frame_cnt,
5906 unsigned long *byte_cnt);
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03005907
5908/**
5909 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
5910 *
5911 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
5912 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
5913 *
5914 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5915 * @inst_id: the local instance id
5916 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
5917 * @gfp: allocation flags
5918 */
5919void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5920 u8 inst_id,
5921 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
5922 gfp_t gfp);
Ayala Beker92bc43b2016-09-20 17:31:21 +03005923
5924/**
5925 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
5926 *
5927 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
5928 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
5929 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
5930 *
5931 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5932 * @match: match event information
5933 * @gfp: allocation flags
5934 */
5935void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5936 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
5937 gfp_t gfp);
5938
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07005939#endif /* MAC80211_H */